راهنمای محصول

ManualsBrandsSamsung ManualsCamcordersSAMSUNG IT100

ﺡﻭﺮﺸﻣ یﺎﻫ ﻞﻤﻌﻟﺍﺭﻮﺘﺳﺩ ﻞﻣﺎﺷ ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﻪﭼﺮﺘﻓﺩ ﻦﻳﺍ

ﺖﻗﺩ ﻪﺑ ﺍﺭ ﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﻪﭼﺮﺘﻓﺩ ﻦﻳﺍ

ﺎﻔﻄﻟ .ﺖﺳﺍ ﻦﻴﺑﺭﻭﺩ ﺯﺍ ﻩﺩﺎﻔﺘﺳﺍ

.ﺪﻴﻨﮐ ﻪﻌﻟﺎﻄﻣ

ﻊﻳﺮﺳ ﻉﺎﺟﺭﺍ

ﺐﻟﺎﻄﻣ ﺖﺳﺮﻬﻓ

ﻪﻴﻟﻭﺍ یﺎﻫﺩﺮﮑﻠﻤﻋ

ﻪﺘﻓﺮﺸﻴﭘ یﺎﻫﺩﺮﮑﻠﻤﻋ

یﺭﺍﺩﺮﺒﻤﻠﻴﻓ ﻭ یﺭﺍﺩﺮﺒﺴﮑﻋ یﺎﻫ ﻪﻨﻳﺰﮔ

ﺶﻳﺍﺮﻳﻭ/ﺶﺨﭘ

ﺎﻫ ﺖﺳﻮﻴﭘ

ﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﺖﺳﺮﻬﻓ

ﺪﯿﻨﮐ ﮏﯿﻠﮐ ﺕﺎﻋﻮﺿﻮﻣ ﺯﺍ ﯽﮑﯾ یﻭﺭ



User Manual

IT100

Summary of content (95 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ — ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣/‬ﻓﻮﺕ( ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺜﻴﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻇﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺏ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 5
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪©2009 SAMSUNG DIGITAL IMAGING CO., LTD.‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪٢۵‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫‪DUAL IS‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫] [‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ؛ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ )ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪h‬‬ ‫) (‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﻣ
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬ ‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < s‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪٢٧ e‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪٢٩ e b‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ( ‪٣٨ e‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۴٢ e‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < s‬ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی ‪٢٧ e‬‬ ‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ‪٣٨ e‬‬ ‫● ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ‪٣٩ e‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫● ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴٨ e‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣ
PAGE 9
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٣۴ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪٣۵ .................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ‪٣۵ .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٣۵ ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪٣۶ ..............................................................................
PAGE 10
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٧٢ ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٧٣ .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪٧٣ ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٧۴ ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٧۴ ...........................................................................
PAGE 11
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺎﻻی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫● ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫● ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ )]‪ ،([t] ،[F] ،[M] ،[D‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪EV‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ACB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﮑﺮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ a‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪(OIS‬‬ ‫● ‪ OIS‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ً‬‫)ﻣﺜﻼ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪s‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ‪ OIS‬ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ h‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Fn‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻴﺰی ﺟﻠﻮی‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ »ﻟﺮﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ« ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢١‬‬ ‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪ d‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٠‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‬ ‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬‫)ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ‬‫‪ -‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ s‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﺗﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ b‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺎﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ d‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ p‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 32
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ (MPEG4.AVC) H.264‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ‪ ،(MPEG4 part10/AVC) H.264‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ‪ ISO/IEC‬ﻭ ‪ ITU-T‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 33
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪sbdpa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭی ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ۴٠ ،‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ‬ ‫‪Svsbdpa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪Svsbdpa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ژﺳﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻑ ‪ ۶‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪sbpa‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ssbpa‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ*‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی‬ ‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‬ ‫‪vdpa‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺩﺭ »ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫‪vdpa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫‪sbdpa‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﮐﺰ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪sbdpa‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ »ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ« ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ »ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ«‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪(EV‬‬ ‫‪vdp‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ )‪(-‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺧﻨﺜﯽ )‪(٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪(ACB‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬ ‫‪vdp‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺮی‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺑﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ژﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪:AEB‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪vsdpa‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ 0 ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ(‬ ‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﮑﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ← ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[F‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[o‬‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[t‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫]‪[F‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪ :R‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :G ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪ :B ،‬ﺁﺑﯽ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪/‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪ ،DPOF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧۶‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،A/V‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ ،HDTV‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪QuickTime Player 7.5‬‬ ‫● ‪ ٣٫٢ ،Intel Pentium 4‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪،AMD Athlin 64FX/‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٫۶‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬ ‫● ‪ Windows XP service pack2‬ﻳﺎ ‪Vista‬‬ ‫● ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ۵١٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﻡ )‪ ١) (RAM‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬ ‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﮑﯽ ‪ ۶۴‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ )‪ nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺮی‬ ‫‪ ATI X1600‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪) Samsung Digital Camera Installer‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ (Samsung‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows XP‬‬ ‫● ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ Windows 2000/Vista‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ ‪My Computer Removable Disk DCIM‬‬ ‫‪ 100SSCAM‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ‪) Next‬ﺑﻌﺪی( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) Help‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ( ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )‪ ((MPEG4.AVC) H.264‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﻂ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫● ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫●‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫●‬ ‫‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ‪Mac‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪QuickTime Player 7.5‬‬ ‫● ‪ 1.8‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ Power Mac G5/1.83‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ Intel Core Duo‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬ ‫● ‪ Mac OS X‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ 10.3.
PAGE 72
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫● ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪(3 ،2 ،1 ،‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .
PAGE 76
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ(‪) .‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ‪ :*NTSC‬ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ژﺍﭘﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺰﻳﮏ‪.‬‬ ‫● ‪) PAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ BDGHI‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ(‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻳﺶ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﮋﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭک‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻼﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﺰی‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﮕﺎﭘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﺲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻭژ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪/1080i* ،720p ،480p :NTSC‬‬ ‫‪(1080i* ،720p ،576p :PAL‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧۵‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 80
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﺩﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑُﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 81
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ SD 1‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪، (Secure Digital) SD‬‬ ‫‪ ،(Secure Digital High Capacity) SDHC‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ (Multimedia Card) MMC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪ ،a‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ،12M‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ‪) OIS ،‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴۵‬‬ ‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 86
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪) codec‬ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭ‪/‬ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎ( ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ‪ QuickTime® Player‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ‪ Codec Pack Full‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪QuickTime® Player 7.5‬‬ ‫‪ QuickTime® Player 7.5 .١‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪(H.264 (MPEG4.AVC)) MP4‬‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ QuickTime® Player‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ ١⁄٢/٣٣ CCD‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١/٠٩‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٢/٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻞ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٢/۴‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ= ‪ ۵ - ٢۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ ٣۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی‪ ٢٨ - ١۴٠ :‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪F-stop‬‬ ‫‪) F5.8‬ﺗﻠﻪ( ‪) F3.
PAGE 88
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫● ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ :‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪RGB ،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬ ‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،H-‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،L-‬ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫●‬ ‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ
PAGE 89
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ١ SD‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺘﯽ‬ ‫● ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬ ‫● ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫● ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٧۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی(‬ ‫ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪) SD‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬‫ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪) SDHC‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬‫ ‪) MMC Plus‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ۴ ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ ‪٢٠‬‬‫ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪۴٠٠٠ x ٣٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪١۴٢‬‬ ‫‪٢٧۴‬‬ ‫‪٣٨٩‬‬ ‫‪٣٩٨۴ x ٢۶۵۶‬‬ ‫‪١۶٢‬‬ ‫‪٣٠٢‬‬ ‫‪۴٢۶‬‬ ‫‪٣٩۶٨
PAGE 90
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ )‪ ١,٠۵٠ ،SLB-10A‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﻤﻖ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﺮﺽ(‬ ‫‪ ٩۴/۵ x ۵٨/٩ x ٢٢/۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ ١۵۵‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪٪ ٨۵ - ۵‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪Samsung Master, QuickTime® Player 7.5, Adobe Reader‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ(‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﺠﺰﺍی ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ(‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 92
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫پ‬ ‫‪۶١ ،۴۵ ACB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ‪٧٨‬‬ ‫‪۶۵ Adobe Reader‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪۶١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٠‬‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪٧۶ +Anynet‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪٧۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪٣۶‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٧٠ Mac‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪۶۵ Windows‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪۴۴‬‬ ‫‪۶۵ QuickTime Player‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ‪۴۶‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪۴۶‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ‪۴۶‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪۶۵‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪۶٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫‪۶٢ DPOF‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺁ‬
PAGE 93
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )‪۴٨ (AEB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ‪۴٨‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ‪۴٨‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪١٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪٢٩‬‬ ‫‪٣٠ Dual IS‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣١‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪٢٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٢۶‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪٧١‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣١‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ‪٧۶ AF‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪۵۴‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ‪۵٩‬‬ ‫ﺥ‬ ‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪۶٧‬‬ ‫چ‬ ‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ‪٧۶‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪٣٠ Dual IS‬‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪١٩‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪١٣ MENU‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٢۶‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١
PAGE 94
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ‪۶‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪٣٩‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ‪٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪٣٨‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪٣٩‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ‪٣٩‬‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٢٣‬‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ‪٧٩‬‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪١۴‬‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪٣٠ ،٢١ (OIS‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪٧۴‬‬ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪۵۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪۵٧‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٣١‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪۴١‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪۴١‬‬ ‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪٨٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪٣٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ک‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ‪٨٠‬‬ ‫‪٨
PAGE 95
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ‪ http://www.samsungcamera.com/‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ‪ ،CE‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ‬ ‫)‪ (EC‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.